the bmw m2 coupe.

Contents
BMW M
A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
THE BMW M2 COUPE.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
M2
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW M2.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new
BMW M2. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehi‐
cle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that
will help you make full use of the technical features available in
your BMW M2. The manual also contains information designed
to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contrib‐
ute to maintaining the value of your BMW M2.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable trip.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID4 II/17, 03 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 220.
6
Information
At a glance
14
18
27
30
Cockpit
iDrive
Voice activation system
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
168
170
172
185
187
191
193
195
202
209
Refueling
Fuel
Wheels and tires
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Coolant
Maintenance
Replacing components
Breakdown assistance
Care
Reference
Controls
34
50
62
66
81
96
101
119
124
132
140
149
Mobility
Opening and closing
Settings
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Lights
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
216 Technical data
218 Appendix
220 Everything from A to Z
Driving tips
156
157
161
164
BMW M2 Technology
Things to remember when driving
Loading
Saving fuel
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
Additional sources of
information
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general information
on BMW, for example on technology, are avail‐
able on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
Symbols and displays
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
Display in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Information
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
the features and options applicable to your ve‐
hicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Symbols on vehicle components
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
cause of the selected optional features or the
country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to
answer any questions that you may have about
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
7
Information
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, for
instance maintenance and repair, according to
BMW specifications with properly trained per‐
sonnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as
"another qualified service center or repair
shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐
sequent damage and related safety risks.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
Parts and accessories
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
8
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Information
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
ous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate this technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer — such as vehicle
emergency locating — allow certain vehicle
data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
9
Information
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
Vehicle identification
number
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle..
This data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
Reporting safety defects
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Information
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
At a glance
This chapter shows the arrangement of the
buttons, switches and displays. Moreover, you
will become familiar with the available control
concepts and options quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1
Power windows 46
Light switch 96
2
Exterior mirror operation 58
3
Glove compartment on the driver's
side 150
Driver assistance systems
Intelligent Safety 109
Lane departure warning 115
4
Lights off
Daytime running lights 98
Parking lights 96
Low beams 96
Lights
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Cockpit
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 97
9
Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 6
Adaptive Light Control 98
High-beam Assistant 98
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Instrument lighting 99
5
At a glance
Steering column stalk, left
Voice activation 27
Turn signal 71
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
High beams, head‐
light flasher 71
High-beam Assistant 98
Thumbwheel for selection lists 90
10
Roadside parking lights 96
Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 67
Auto Start/Stop function 68
Onboard Computer 90
11 Steering column stalk, right
6
M double-clutch transmission: shift pad‐
dles 76
7
Steering wheel buttons, left
Wipers 72
Rain sensor 73
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 124
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 74
Cruise control: store speed
12
Horn, entire surface
13
Heated steering wheel 61
Cruise control: resume speed
Cruise control rocker switch
8
Instrument cluster 81
14 Adjust the steering wheel 60
15 Unlock hood 185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
15
At a glance
Cockpit
In the vicinity of the center console
1
Control Display 18
6
Climate control 132
2
Glove compartment 149
7
Controller with buttons 19
3
Ventilation 138
8
Parking brake 71
4
Hazard warning system 202
Central locking system 38
5
Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication 6
16
9
Driving Dynamics Control 121
Dynamic Stability Control 119
10 M double-clutch transmission, selector
lever 76
Manual transmission, selector lever 76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Cockpit
At a glance
All about the roofliner
1
Emergency Request, SOS 202
4
Reading lights 99
2
Glass sunroof 47
5
Interior lights 99
3
Indicator light, front-seat passen‐
ger airbag 104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
17
At a glance
iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Overview of control elements
Operation
1
Control Display
2
Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions.
Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐
play; otherwise, the Control Display can be
damaged.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning, the normal functions
are restored.
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
Switching off
1.
18
Press button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
iDrive
At a glance
2. "Turn off control display"
3. Move in four directions.
Controller with navigation system
Buttons on the controller
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Button
Function
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
MENU
Opens the main menu.
RADIO
Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA
Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV
Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL
Opens the Phone menu.
BACK
Displays the previous panel.
OPTION
Open the Options menu.
1. Turn.
Controller without navigation system
2. Press.
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1. Turn.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
19
At a glance
iDrive
2. Press.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
3. Move in two directions.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Buttons on the controller
Button
Function
MENU
Opens the main menu.
AUDIO
Open audio menu last listened to,
switch between audio menus.
2. Press the controller.
TEL
Opens the Phone menu.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
BACK
Open previous panel.
OPTION Open the Options menu.
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
Operating concept
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Opening the main menu
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Press button.
Closes current panel and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
iDrive
Opens new panel on top of previous
screen.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
At a glance
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
Selecting functions
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
1. "Settings"
Options menu
3. Select the desired function.
2. "Touchpad"
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ "Interactive map": use the interactive
map.
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
21
At a glance
iDrive
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 25.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set language
determines what input is possible. Where
necessary, enter special characters via the
Controller.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button. The main menu is dis‐
played.
2. Turn the Controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the Controller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right
in the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
3. If necessary, move the Controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the Controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the Controller.
Using interactive map
The interactive map in the navigation system
can be moved via the touchpad.
Function
Operation
Interactive map.
Swipe into respective
direction.
Enlarge/shrink in‐
teractive map.
Drag in or out on the
touchpad with fingers.
Display menu.
Tap once.
5. Turn the Controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the Controller.
Changing settings
You can use the touchpad to change Control
Display settings, for instance volume. Swipe
left or right accordingly.
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
iDrive
6. Turn the Controller to set the hours, and
then press the Controller.
At a glance
Symbol Meaning
SMS text message received.
7. Turn the Controller to set the minutes, and
then press the Controller.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
Status information
SIM card is missing.
Status field
Enter PIN.
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol
Meaning
▷ Sound output, on/off.
CD/DVD player.
▷ Signal strength of cellular network.
Music collection.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows:
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Radio symbols
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
The sound output has been
switched off.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
23
At a glance
iDrive
Switching the split screen on/off
On the Control Display:
Without navigation system and
telephone
1.
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
tons.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Saving a function
Selecting the display
1. Highlight the function via iDrive.
On the Control Display:
1.
2.
Press button.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the Controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the Controller or select "Split screen
content".
Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, e.g., that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
5. Select the desired menu item.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation
destinations, phone numbers and menu en‐
tries.
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
iDrive
At a glance
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Entering letters and numbers
Concept
On the Control Display:
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently deleted
using iDrive.
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
General information
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
General information
2. Select additional letters or numbers, if
needed.
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters
or number.
▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
Press the Controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cook‐
ies.
▷ Voice notes.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters
and numbers:
Symbol
Function
▷ Login accounts.
Enter the letters.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes.
Enter the numbers.
or
Tip the Controller up.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Select the symbol.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Continue"
Without navigation system
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
6. "OK"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
25
At a glance
iDrive
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
on the Control Display.
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Voice activation system
At a glance
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
To set the language, refer to page 94.
Using the voice activation
system
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
Concept
2. Wait for the signal.
Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐
play can be operated by voice commands via
the voice activation system. The system sup‐
ports you with announcements during input.
3. Say the command.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
Functional requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate
the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for many functions.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
27
At a glance
Voice activation system
Having possible commands read aloud
3. ›Radio‹
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹.
4. ›Tone‹
E.g., if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
Via short command
Executing functions using short
commands
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, for instance ›Vehicle
status‹.
The list for short commands of the voice acti‐
vation system can be called up via the
Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control Dis‐
play.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Tone‹
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog
or a short version.
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
Additional commands for the help dialog:
1. "Settings"
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select setting.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: announces in‐
formation about the principle of operation
for the voice activation system.
Example: opening the tone
settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Voice activation system
At a glance
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 202, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
29
At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
basic vehicle functions and what to do in case
of a breakdown. This information can also be
displayed while driving.
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
ping the links.
Search by images
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the Controller to browse from page to page.
Based on illustrations, image search provides
information and descriptions. This is useful,
e.g., when the terminology for a feature is not
known.
30
Page by page without link access
Scroll back.
Scroll forward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - operating instructions
for the currently selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐
rectly.
At a glance
Programmable memory buttons
General information
Opening via iDrive
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via iDrive.
1.
Press button or move the Controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
2.
Press selected button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
operating instructions
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display
and to alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button or move the Controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5.
Opens a new display every time.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Remote control
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
General information
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replace the battery, refer to
page 36.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 44.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 41.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 193.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
34
1
Unlocking
2
Locking
3
Unlocking the tailgate
4
Panic mode
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Opening and closing
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 44,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button of the remote control
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 41, are applied.
▷ The interior lights and courtesy lights are
activated. This function is not available, if
the interior lights were switched off man‐
ually.
▷ The welcome lights are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 44, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote control.
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are being locked.
Controls
If the engine or ignition is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition
must be switched off by means of the Start/
Stop button.
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy light
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior
lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 44.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 44, is
switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
35
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
4. Insert a type CR 2450 battery with the pos‐
itive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the remote
control until it engages.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Replacing the battery
Loss of the remote controls
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 37.
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 36.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Opening and closing
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a differ‐
ent location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 37.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the remote control
Controls
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Removing
1. Hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Integrated key
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key can also be used for the
glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
37
Controls
Opening and closing
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
Overview
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key.
Button for the central locking system.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Unlocking and locking
Press button. For locking, the doors must be
closed.
Alarm system
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
Opening
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 37.
Button for central locking
system
▷
Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
vehicle's interior.
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Opening and closing
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
ger for approx. 1 second without grasping the
door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
▷ Opening tailgate.
Convenient closing
Functional requirements
Safety information
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
Controls
WARNING
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Unlocking
Closing
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely.
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
This corresponds with pressing and holding
the button
on the remote control.
Locking
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Open tailgate
General information
If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door with your fin‐
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
39
Controls
Opening and closing
Safety information
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 37.
Tailgate
Opening
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 44.
Press button on the tailgate.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 36.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Opening from the outside
Controls
Locking separately
The tailgate can be locked separately using the
switch in the glove compartment. If the glove
compartment is locked, the tailgate cannot be
opened.
▷ Tailgate secured, arrow 1.
▷ Tailgate not secured, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press button on the tailgate.
▷
Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. The
tailgate is secured and decoupled from the
central locking system.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
using a valet service. The remote control can
be handed out without the integrated key.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐
mote control, refer to page 35.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Opening from the inside
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The tailgate unlocks.
Closing
Personal Profile
Concept
Via Personal Profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
General information
Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down.
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
41
Controls
Opening and closing
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently activated.
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐
tion, steering wheel position.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings stored in it will be applied auto‐
matically. The new driver profile is assigned to
the remote control currently used.
Profile management
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control: it
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allo‐
cated to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own
remote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and
functions are stored in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings depends on country
and equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
42
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Opening profiles
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated. This allows you
to call up personal vehicle settings, even if you
did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐
mote control.
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal pro‐
files.
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Opening and closing
3. "Guest"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
Using iDrive:
Controls
mended formats for profile export. Other for‐
mats may not support the export.
Importing profiles
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
imported via BMW Online.
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be
imported via the USB interface.
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The active profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Reset profiles
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
The settings of the profile currently in use are
reset to their factory settings.
USB interface: "USB device"
Using iDrive:
Display profile list during start
1. "Settings"
The profile list can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
2. "Profiles"
Using iDrive:
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
Exporting profiles
3. Open "Options".
Most settings of the profile currently in use can
be exported.
4. "Display user list at startup"
Exporting can be helpful for storing and re‐
trieving personal settings, for instance before
delivering the vehicle to a workshop. Profiles
can be taken to another vehicle equipped with
the Personal Profile function.
System limits
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
A clear assignment between the remote con‐
trol and driver may not be possible in the fol‐
lowing cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his
or her own remote control, but another
person is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Popular file systems for USB media are sup‐
ported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom‐
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐
side of the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
43
Controls
Opening and closing
Settings
2. "Doors/key"
General information
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, various settings for open‐
ing and closing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 41, currently used.
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
Unlocking
Doors
Automatic locking
Using iDrive:
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3.
▷ With alarm system:
2. "Doors/key"
Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Using iDrive:
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
1. "Settings"
Using iDrive:
2. "Doors/key"
1. "Settings"
3.
2. "Doors/key"
Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate unlocks.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are un‐
locked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
44
3. "Last seat position autom."
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Opening and closing
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
Controls
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Switching on and off
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or with Comfort Access, the
alarm system is switched on and off at the
same time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 46.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
45
Controls
Opening and closing
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
cle is towed.
driver's or front passenger door com‐
pletely.
Interior motion sensor
Power windows
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Safety information
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
Overview
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 36.
▷ With Comfort Access:
If you are carrying the remote control on
your person, grasp the door handle on the
46
Power windows
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Opening and closing
Controls
Opening
Closing without the jam protection
system
▷
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
1.
The window closes with limited jam pro‐
tection . If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
2.
Closing
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
▷
The window closes without jam protec‐
tion .
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo‐
tion.
Glass sunroof, electric
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately using the
same switch.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 39.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Pinch protection system
Safety information
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
WARNING
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
47
Controls
Opening and closing
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open
automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically.
The sliding visor can be manually closed.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
Overview
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
page 38.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not completely opened
automatically, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof
tilts.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor open together while the
switch is being held.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a certain value
when closing the glass sunroof, the closing op‐
eration is interrupted once the roof reaches the
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos‐
ing from the tilted position. The glass sunroof
opens slightly.
Closing from the open position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resist‐
ance point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being
held. The sliding visor can
be manually closed.
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Opening and closing
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
Controls
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the glass sunroof is completely closed.
2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with‐
out jam protection.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the follow‐
ing conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi‐
tion.
▷ The engine is running.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection .
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
49
Controls
Settings
Settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
the backrest so that it is in the most upright
position as possible and do not adjust again
while driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally,
observe the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Seats, refer to page 50.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 54.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 55.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 101.
Seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
1
Forward/backward
2
Thigh support
3
Seat tilt
4
Backrest width
5
Lumbar support
6
Height
7
Backrest tilt
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a risk of
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Settings
Controls
Forward/backward
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly making sure it engages
properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
Height
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the function, refer
to page 44, is activated for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 57.
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Overview
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
1
Memory function
2
Backrest width
3
Lumbar support
4
Backrest tilt
5
Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
51
Controls
Settings
Forward/backward
Backrest tilt
Push switch forward or backward.
Move switch forward or backward.
Height
Thigh support
Push switch up or down.
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Seat tilt
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the button:
Move switch up or down.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Settings
Controls
Switching off
Backrest width
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjust‐
ing the side wings of the backrest.
Settings
▷ Press the front section of
the button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width in‐
creases.
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Entering the rear
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to an unlocked
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There
is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the back‐
rests before driving.◀
Front seat heating
Overview
Manual length adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
ment.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
53
Controls
Settings
Safety belts
Original position
1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐
tion.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Electric forward/backward adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
ment.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Number of safety belts and safety belt
buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to
ensure occupant safety. However, they can
only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. To change the entry area:
▷
Press and hold this button until
the seat has moved to the de‐
sired position. Releasing the button
stops window/roof movement.
▷
Press button briefly. The seat au‐
tomatically moves to the end po‐
sition. Pressing again stops the motion.
Original position
1. Moving the seat to its original position:
▷
Press and hold this button until
the seat has moved to its original
position. Releasing the button stops
window/roof movement.
▷
Press button briefly. The seat
moves to its original position.
Pressing again stops the motion.
2. Fold the backrest back.
54
If the safety belt is used to buckle more
than one person, the protective effect of the
safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow
more than one person to wear a single safety
belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an
occupant's lap, but must be transported and
secured in designated child restraint sys‐
tems.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Settings
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the
holder when fastening it.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must en‐
gage audibly.
Controls
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
Display
The indicator light lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
55
Controls
Settings
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Adjusting the height
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Settings
Controls
Height
Settings
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Memory function
Folding down the head restraint
Concept
Only fold the head restraint back if no one will
be sitting in the seat in question.
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func‐
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 41.
▷ To the back: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint back, arrow 2.
▷ To the front: fold head restraint forward un‐
til the head restraint engages.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Safety information
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory
function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
57
Controls
Settings
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open and close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
Overview
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐
locked via the remote control, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to
page 44, is activated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 57.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Settings
Overview
Controls
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
1
Settings 59
2
Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3
Folding in and out 59
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the but‐
ton movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1.
Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Folding in and out
Deactivating
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Fold the mirrors in and out is advantageous in
the following situations:
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
59
Controls
Settings
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Flip lever
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Turn knob
Settings
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Photocells are used for control:
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Settings
Controls
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
61
Controls
Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight, and size.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Always transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear
seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
62
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Secure children
shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child
restraint systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
General information
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 103.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Transporting children safely
Safety information
Controls
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Safety information
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 103.
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child
restraint systems or of child restraint systems
exposed to an accident and their fastening
systems can be limited or lost. A child can
e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, e.g., in the
event of an accident or braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Have damaged child restraint systems
or of child restraint systems exposed to an ac‐
cident and their fastening systems checked
and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
the best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
63
Controls
Transporting children safely
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
Child seat security
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
Safety information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child
restraint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
64
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Transporting children safely
Controls
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH symbols.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint systems with tether
strap
1
Direction of travel
2
Head restraint
3
Hook for upper retaining strap
4
Anchor
5
Rear window shelf
6
Seat backrest
7
Upper retaining strap
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Safety information
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1. Remove the anchor cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
NOTE
The mounting points for the upper re‐
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐
per retaining straps.◀
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Routing the retaining strap
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
65
Controls
Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
M double-clutch transmission:
the engine starts with the brake
pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop
button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop
button is pressed.
Ignition on
M double-clutch transmission: press the Start/
Stop button, and do not press on the brake
pedal at the same time.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
66
Ignition off
M double-clutch transmission: press the Start/
Stop button again without stepping on the
brake.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
When switching off the ignition, the transmis‐
sion position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
some minutes of no use.
Radio-ready state
General information
In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐
sumers remain ready for operation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving
Activating
Controls
WARNING
With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
button.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
If the engine is not running and the ignition is
switched on: the system automatically acti‐
vates radio-ready state when the door is
opened if the lights are switched off or the day‐
time running lights are switched on.
▷ Set the parking brake.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐
stance the ignition is automatically switched
off for the following reasons:
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with
the Start/Stop button.
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
a risk of property damage. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
M double-clutch transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Starting the engine
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Safety information
Manual transmission
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
67
Controls
Driving
Engine stop
M double-clutch transmission
Safety information
Switching off the engine
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
1. Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to
a stop.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Before driving into a vehicle wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash,
observe instructions for going into an auto‐
matic vehicle wash, refer to page 209.
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving
off.
The Auto Start/Stop function is only available
in the COMFORT or TRACTION driving pro‐
grams, refer to page 121.
General information
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/
Stop function is active, it is available when the
vehicle is traveling faster than about
3 mph/5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving
M double-clutch transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is stopped.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Controls
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ M double-clutch transmission: by releasing
the brake pedal.
▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
pressed.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Double-clutch transmission: change from
selector lever position D to N, R or D/S.
▷ M double-clutch transmission: accelerat‐
ing while simultaneously applying the
brake.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
69
Controls
Driving
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
cur, for instance if the brake pedal is de‐
pressed a number of times in succession.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
Preventing an automatic engine stop
with aM double-clutch transmission
Concept
To make it possible to drive off very quickly,
such as at an intersection, the automatic en‐
gine stop can be actively prevented.
Preventing an engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill:
▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
standstill, briefly press the brake pedal
forcefully.
▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal
braking force.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it.
M double-clutch transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, e.g., if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Controls
Releasing
Parking brake
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
If for once use during driving is required, en‐
gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
button down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
The lever returns into its starting position after
actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap
the lever to the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The turn signal flashes three times.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
71
Controls
Driving
The function can be activated or deactivated.
Using iDrive:
Safety information
WARNING
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
72
Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance
point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving
Controls
Switching off and brief wipe
Activating/deactivating
Press the lever down.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
Wiping is started.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:
the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the
rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐
tion is preset.
Safety information
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of property damage.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
73
Controls
Driving
Windshield and headlight
washer system
Fold-away position of the wipers
Safety information
The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐
shield in the fold-away position.
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
Concept
General information
Important, e.g., when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
ervoir is empty.◀
Cleaning the windshield
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are
switched on.
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With frosty conditions, make sure that the
blades are not frozen to the windshield
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly
vertical position
4. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Controls
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of property damage.
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.◀
NOTE
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not mix different windshield washer
concentrates or antifreeze. Observe the infor‐
mation and mixing ratios provided on the con‐
tainers.◀
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
75
Controls
Driving
Overview
6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the
right.◀
Shifting
General information
Depending on the engine installation, the en‐
gine speed during a shifting operation is ad‐
justed automatically as required for harmo‐
nious and dynamic gear shifting.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Manual transmission
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift
lever dynamically to the left and engage re‐
verse gear with a forward shifting movement.
M double-clutch
transmission with Drivelogic
General information
The M double-clutch transmission with Drive‐
logic is an automatic shift transmission with
two clutches and partial transmissions in which
the gears can be changed without interrupting
the tractive force.
The operation is via the selector lever or two
shift paddles on the steering wheel.
Functions
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Drive mode or Sequential mode.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ Various drive programs, Drivelogic.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
▷ Automatic downshifting and protection
from misshifting even in sequential mode.
▷ Launch Control.
▷ Low Speed Assistant.
NOTE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk
of property damage. When shifting into 5th or
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
Controls
The engaged selector lever position is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster and on the se‐
lector lever.
If a selector lever position is engaged, the vehi‐
cle may start rolling, after the brake is released,
e.g., on downhill slopes. Thus, drive off imme‐
diately after releasing the brake.
Use the Slow Speed Assistant for maneuver‐
ing and during stop-and-go traffic.
Low Speed Assistant
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
Concept
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at
very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking
speed.
Selector lever, selector lever positions
Overview
This can also be used for rocking the vehicle in
the snow. To do this, switch between reverse
gear and forward gear without stepping on the
brakes in the process.
Safety information
NOTE
When using the function and simultane‐
ously stepping on the brake pedal for a longer
time, the transmission can overheat. There is a
risk of property damage. When using the func‐
tion, do not brake for a longer period.◀
▷ R: reverse gear.
Activating
▷ N: neutral.
▷
Center position, forward position.
▷ +: manual upshifting.
▷ -: manual downshifting.
▷ D/S: switch between drive mode and se‐
quential mode.
Engaging a selector lever position
Press on the brake pedal and pull or push the
selector lever in the corresponding direction.
1. Engage a driving position.
2. Briefly tap the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle rolls at minimum speed.
This is possible in 1st and 2nd gear and in re‐
verse gear.
Deactivating
Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to a
stop.
As soon as the selector lever is released, it re‐
verts to the center position. In position R, the
selector lever locks.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
77
Controls
Driving
Flashing display on the selector lever
of the double clutch transmission
The actually engaged transmission position
can deviate from the selector lever position in
some situations. The display in the selector
lever flashes.
Observe the display in the instrument cluster
in these cases.
forward gear and reverse gear without step‐
ping on the brakes in the process.
N is Neutral
The vehicle may roll in selector lever posi‐
tion N, e.g., in vehicle washes, refer to
page 209.
P Park
D is Drive mode
The drive wheels are blocked.
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automati‐
cally changed.
P is engaged automatically:
Kickdown: for maximum acceleration, e.g.,
when passing. To do this, depress the acceler‐
ator pedal past the resistance point.
Switch to Sequential mode: shift using the
shift paddles or the selector lever, or push the
selector lever in the D/S direction.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is set.
Displays in the instrument cluster
S is Sequential mode
Use the shift paddles or the selector lever to
upshift or downshift without letting off the gas.
▷ Shortly before falling below a gear-de‐
pendent minimum speed, the transmission
is automatically downshifted.
▷ Upshifting or downshifting is done only if
the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate.
E.g., there is no downshifting if the engine
speed is too high.
▷ Kickdown: the lowest possible gear is se‐
lected by simultaneously operating the
kickdown and the left shift paddle or selec‐
tor lever.
▷ It is also possible to start out in 2nd gear,
e.g., on icy roads.
Switch to Drive mode: push selector lever in
D/S direction.
Reverse R
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
It is also possible to rock the vehicle up to
6 mph/10 km/h. To do this, switch between
78
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 66, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 66, and when position R
or D is set.
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example: P.
Information
When the external temperature is very low, the
display may not work. Current driving direction
is recognizable at the engaged selector lever
position.
Gear change
General information
Shifting in Sequential mode possible.
A shift in Drive mode causes a switch to Se‐
quential mode.
Using the selector lever
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
Controls
▷ SPORT+: consistently sporty driving.
Sequential mode
Choice of three driving programs:
▷ COMFORT: comfortable shifting opera‐
tions.
▷ SPORT: sporty, fast shifting operations.
▷ SPORT+: maximum shifting speed, Launch
Control, refer to page 79.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
Activating
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Activate program via the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 121, button.
Drivelogic
Launch Control
Concept
Concept
Using Drivelogic, the characteristics of the hy‐
brid system can be adjusted. For this purpose,
different driving programs are available in Drive
and Sequential mode.
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
The driving programs can be programmed us‐
ing Driving Dynamics Control.
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Overview
General information
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 157, period.
Button in the vehicle
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Activate Launch Control
1. Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control, refer
to page 119.
Driving programs
2. Select Sequential mode with gear 1.
Drive mode
Choice of three driving programs:
3. With the engine running, apply the brake
with the left foot.
▷ COMFORT: efficient driving.
4. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
▷ SPORT: sporty driving.
The starting engine speed adjusts.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
79
Controls
Driving
5. If necessary, change the starting engine
speed by 500 rpm via cruise control.
6. Release the brake, the vehicle accelerates.
Continue to depress the accelerator pedal.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as
the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
Launch Control is available again only after a
certain distance has been driven.
System limits
This transmission has an overheating protec‐
tion mechanism, which protects the clutch
from extreme stress.
▷ Indicator lamp lights up yellow:
transmission too hot.
Avoid high engine stress and fre‐
quent starts.
▷ Indicator lamp lights up red: transmission
is overheating.
Further driving at a moderate pace is pos‐
sible. At the next opportunity, stop the ve‐
hicle, shut off the engine and allow the
transmission to cool down.
Avoid fast starts, and on inclines did not accel‐
erate lightly while letting the clutch slip; other‐
wise, the transmission may overheat.
During traffic jams or at very low speeds, use
the Low Speed Assistant, refer to page 77.
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Displays
Controls
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Overview, instrument cluster
1
Speedometer
5
Electronic displays 81
2
Messages, for instance Check Control
6
Fuel gauge 85
3
Tachometer 85
7
Reset miles 86
4
Current fuel consumption
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 90.
▷ Date, refer to page 86.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 86.
▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 87.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 69.
▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 86.
▷ Onboard Computer, refer to page 90.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
81
Controls
Displays
▷ Messages, for instance Check Control, re‐
fer to page 82.
▷ Range, refer to page 86.
buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be
activated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 121.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 87.
▷ Speed Limit Info, refer to page 89.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
▷ Time, refer to page 86.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
SMS text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Parking brake
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 71.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a col‐
lision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is
too small.
Increase distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle
approaches another vehicle at a relatively high
differential speed.
Red lights
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Safety belt reminder
Person warning
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country-specific
models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
seat.
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated: safety
belt on the driver or passenger side is not
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Displays
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
adapt driving style to the driving circumstan‐
ces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Controls
Indicator lights light up: MDM has mal‐
functioned. Have the system checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 120.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 108.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light illuminates.
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a
low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Observe the information in the Check Control
message.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 119.
The indicator light flashes and then illuminates
continuously.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control deactivated
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can
be detected.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐
tivated.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 119.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
M Dynamic Mode MDM is switched on.
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 120.
Indicator light also flashes: MDM con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
vehicle is stabilized.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 104.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
83
Controls
Displays
Steering system
Parking lights, headlight
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the steering system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 194.
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traffic
situation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 98.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 72.
Hiding Check Control messages
Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 115.
Green lights
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 71.
84
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed
consecutively.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Displays
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
again automatically.
▷
▷
Temporary display
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. These
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Controls
Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
Integrated Owner's Manual.
"Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷
"Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Fuel gauge
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 168.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Tachometer
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Further help
Within the supplementary text, additional help
can be selected, depending on the Check
Control message.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
85
Controls
Displays
Odometer and trip odometer
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
The date can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Range
Show/reset miles
Press the button.
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the Onboard
Computer.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance
taking curves aggressively, the engine
function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Current fuel consumption
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentallyfriendly manner.
The time can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Displays
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Controls
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐
played as bar in the instrument cluster.
The current efficiency can be displayed.
Using iDrive:
The following systems are displayed:
1. "Settings"
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
2. "Instrument cluster"
▷ Energy recovery.
3. "Additional indicators"
▷ Climate control output.
Energy recovery
Service requirements
"EfficientDynamics info"
Display
General information
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while the vehicle is coasting.
The vehicle battery is partially
charged and fuel consumption
can be reduced.
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
EfficientDynamics display
Display
Displaying Efficient Dynamics
Detailed information on service
requirements
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
1. "Vehicle info"
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Using iDrive:
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1. Open "Options".
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
87
Controls
Displays
Gear shift indicator
Symbols
Symbols
Description
Concept
No service is currently re‐
quired.
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
The gear shift indicator is active in the sequen‐
tial mode of the M double clutch transmission
and for the manual transmission.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
General information
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Manual transmission: displaying
Symbol
Using iDrive:
Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
"Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
Shift into neutral.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
Using iDrive:
M double-clutch transmission:
displaying
Example
Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Displays
Speed Limit Info
Controls
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Speed Limit Info
Switching on/off
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐
ing on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
count the information stored in the navigation
system and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Speed limit information"
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐
played on the Info Display in the instrument
cluster via the Onboard Computer.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Speed Limit Info not available.
System limits
Overview
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Camera
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
89
Controls
Displays
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display
Selection lists
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel and the display in the instrument
cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data in the instrument cluster, such as
average values.
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Displays
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Controls
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
you can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired information.
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information is displayed in the Info Display of
the instrument cluster.
Information in detail
Information at a glance
Info Display
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
Info Display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of
arrival.
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
Onboard Computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance
to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
91
Controls
Displays
Resetting average values
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐
age values.
General information
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Displays the current engine temperature,
based on a combination of coolant and engine
oil temperature. As soon as the optimum oper‐
ating temperature has been attained, the indi‐
cator is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en‐
gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed too.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 191.
Distance to destination
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
tance remaining to the destination is displayed
if a destination is entered in the navigation sys‐
tem before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as
the fuel consumption, are displayed. The
values can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a certain distance and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Time of arrival
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment, the estimated time of ar‐
rival is displayed if a destination
is entered in the navigation sys‐
tem before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed Limit Info
Further information, see chapter Speed Limit
Info.
92
The vehicle features two types of Onboard
Computers.
Resetting the trip computer
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come
to a standstill.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Displays
Controls
Sport displays
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
General information
Using iDrive:
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
1. "Settings"
Displaying sport displays
4. Press the Controller.
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
Settings on the Control
Display
2. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
Time
Setting the time zone
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
General information
4. Select the desired time zone.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
The time zone is stored.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Using iDrive:
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
5. Press the controller.
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
Using iDrive:
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
1. "Settings"
3. "Format:"
2. "Speed"
4. Select the desired format.
3. "Warning"
4. Press the Controller.
The time format is stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
93
Controls
Displays
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
1. "Settings"
Units of measurement
Setting the units of measurement
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
2. "Time/Date"
1. "Settings"
3. "Auto time set"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
Date
4. Select the desired unit.
Setting the date
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
1. "Settings"
Brightness
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
5. Press the Controller.
1. "Settings"
6. Make the settings for the month and year.
2. "Control display"
The date is stored.
3. "Brightness"
Setting the date format
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
1. "Settings"
5. Press the controller.
2. "Time/Date"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Activating/deactivating the display of
the current vehicle position
Language
Setting the language
Concept
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 28.
94
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
If vehicle location has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
BMW ConnectedDrive app or in the Connec‐
tedDrive customer portal.
Activating/deactivating
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "GPS tracking"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Displays
Controls
3. "GPS tracking"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
95
Controls
Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
Symbol
Function
Low beams
Instrument lighting
Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
General information
Position of switch:
,
,
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is automat‐
ically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol
Function
Automatic headlight control
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking light, refer to page 96.
Adaptive Light Control
Low beams
Lights off
Position of switch:
Daytime running lights
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Parking lights
Roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Lights
Switching on
Controls
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radioready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
Using iDrive:
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic headlight control
Welcome lights and
headlamp courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
ambient brightness, individual light functions
may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
,
Using iDrive:
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
Activating
Position of switch:
1. "Settings"
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low beams are switched
on.
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
97
Controls
Lights
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐
der these conditions, you should always switch
on the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch:
,
,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
.
tion
Activating
Position of switch:
Adaptive Headlight Control is active when the
engine is running.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations
in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
Activating/deactivating
High-beam Assistant
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Concept
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic
situation allows. In the low speed range, the
high beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for instance in towns
and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off at
any time as usual.
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Lights
Activating/deactivating
Controls
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment:
,
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 72.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that
require this, therefore switch off manually.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are controlled automatically.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
99
Controls
Lights
Overview
With a color scheme selected and welcome
lights activated they light up in the line's color
when vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the brightness
of the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
On the Control Display:
1
Interior lights
1. "Settings"
2
Reading lights
2. "Lighting"
Switching the interior lights on/off
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on/off
Press button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
reading lights are located next to the interior
lights in the front and rear.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
Selecting color scheme
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Safety
Controls
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Airbags
1
Front airbag, driver
4
Side airbag
2
Front airbag, front passenger
5
Knee airbag
3
Head airbag
Front airbags
Side airbag
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐
pacts in which safety belts alone would not
provide adequate protection.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
101
Controls
Safety
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
Knee airbag
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and may cause additional injuries due
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving
the optimum protective effect of the airbag
system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
102
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; therefore,
contact BMW Customer Relations or your au‐
thorized BMW service center.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Safety
Controls
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
spective accident severity. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
floor area.◀
Correct function
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
Airbag system malfunctioning
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the frontseat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
103
Controls
Safety
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
point in time when the vehicle was manufac‐
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the frontseat passenger airbags lights up. This indi‐
cates that the child restraint system has been
detected and the front-seat passenger airbags
are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1. Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Safety
Controls
General information
Gray wheels
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 172.
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset at the cor‐
rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a loss of tire inflation pressure is
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
Additonal information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Resetting the system
Status display
The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys‐
tem is active.
General information
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
2. "Vehicle status"
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
3.
"Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
A reset must be performed in the following sit‐
uations:
Reset
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Perform reset"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
All wheels green
6. Drive away.
System is active and will issue a warning re‐
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored dur‐
ing the last reset.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
tus is displayed.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
105
Controls
Safety
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure
loss.
Messages
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched
on.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire inflation
pressure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
106
Measure
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Safety
Actions in the event of a flat tire
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Check the air pressure in all four tires, for
instance using the tire pressure gage of a
tire repair kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been initialized. In this case, initi‐
alize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
repair kit or by changing the tire.
Use of sealant, for instance from the tire repair
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked and re‐
placed at the next opportunity.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, for instance a flat
tire is reported though tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. These circumstances
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
very sharply.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
tected.
Controls
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
107
Controls
Safety
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐
ization was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, an initialization was
performed.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed, for instance
whether or not the TPM is active.
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Concept
Performing initialization
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat
tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Perform reset"
Functional requirements
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured:
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".
108
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Safety
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
Controls
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss
in all four tires will not be recognized.
Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure
regularly.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Runflat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.
Indication of a flat tire
▷ When driving with snow chains.
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Check the air
pressure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a tire repair kit. If
the tire inflation pressure in all tires is cor‐
rect, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
3. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
repair kit or by changing the tire.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐
sion. These systems are active automatically
every time the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button:
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 110.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 113.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
109
Controls
Safety
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
for instance approach control warning with
braking function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure.
Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Approach control warning
with City light braking
function
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
Intelligent Safety button
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
Camera
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
110
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Safety
Detection range
Controls
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Intelligent Safety button
Safety information
WARNING
Camera
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
for instance approach control warning with
braking function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching off
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
The LED lights up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
111
Controls
Safety
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set.
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
Braking intervention
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Object detection can be restricted. Observe
the limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
Prewarning
System limits
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Safety information
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
112
WARNING
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Safety
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
Controls
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent danger of a
collision with pedestrians and includes a brak‐
ing function.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
General information
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
Functional limitations
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
Detection range
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐
ror is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
such as the warning time, the more warnings
are displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of false warnings.
Pedestrian warning with
Approach control
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
113
Controls
Safety
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
for instance approach control warning with
braking function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching off
Press button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are switched on.
The LED lights up.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
Button in the vehicle
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
114
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Safety
Object detection can be restricted. Observe
the limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Controls
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
Lane departure warning
Concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Safety information
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
WARNING
The system does not release the driver
from the personal responsibility to correctly
assess route and traffic situation. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to
the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and
actively intervene in the respective situations.
In the event of a warning, do not unnecessarily
jerk the steering wheel.◀
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
115
Controls
Safety
Overview
Issued warning
Button in the vehicle
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
Lane departure warning
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
Camera
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
116
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Safety
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Brake force display
Concept
Controls
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not
be detected in time. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
Additional brake lamps indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
General information
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
▷ During normal brake application, the bot‐
tom brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the top
brake lights additionally light up.
Attentiveness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is
recommended that the driver takes a break.
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, e.g., and will either output an incor‐
rect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
117
Controls
Safety
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, e.g., in the case of a break
during longer trips on highways.
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving stability control systems
Controls
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
the individual wheels.
General information
Dynamic Stability Control detects, e.g., the fol‐
lowing unstable driving conditions:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
119
Controls
Driving stability control systems
Overview
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go
out.
Button in the vehicle
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
Concept
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Press and hold this button but not longer
than approx. 10 seconds, until the indica‐
tor light for DSC OFF lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Engine tuning switches to a sportier setting.
Press button.
120
Only in the absolute limit area does the system
intervene for stabilization by reducing the en‐
gine power and by braking interventions on the
wheels. In this driving condition, additional
steering corrections may be necessary.
You may find it useful to briefly activate MDM
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Safety information
Deactivating DSC
Activating DSC
M Dynamic Mode makes it possible to drive on
a dry roadway with high longitudinal and trans‐
verse acceleration but with limited driving sta‐
bility.
WARNING
When M Dynamic Mode is activated, sta‐
bilizing interventions are carried out only to a
reduced extent. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of property damage. Adapt to traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations. In the event
of a warning, do not unnecessarily jerk the
steering wheel.◀
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving stability control systems
Controls
Servotronic
Activating MDM
Press button briefly.
The DSC OFF indicator light is illumi‐
nated and TRACTION is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Deactivating MDM
Press button.
DSC OFF indicator light and TRACTION
indicator are no longer illuminated.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Indicator light is illuminated and
TRACTION is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
DSC indicator light also flashes:
M Dynamic Mode controls the drive
forces and braking forces.
Indicator lights light up:
Concept
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
steering function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering more direct when driving
at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel or a comfortable steering response
is conveyed.
Programs
Steering force setting options:
▷ COMFORT: low.
▷ SPORT: high.
▷ SPORT+: high.
Selecting a channel
The desired channel is selected using the Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control, refer to page 121.
M Dynamic Mode or DSC has failed.
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
Active M differential
The concept
The active M differential assures continuously
variable locking of the rear axle differential de‐
pending on the driving situation. This prevents
individual rear wheels from spinning even
when DSC is switched off and in M Dynamic
Mode, so that optimum traction is always as‐
sured in all driving situations.
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to finetune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
program.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her
driving behavior to the situation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
121
Controls
Driving stability control systems
Overview
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in curves.
Button in the vehicle
SPORT+
Concept
Consistently sporty driving with optimized
chassis and suspension and adjusted drive‐
train.
General information
M Dynamic Mode is switched on.
Operating the programs
Button
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Program
Activating SPORT+
DSC OFF
Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
appears in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
DSC OFF indicator lamp is illuminated:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 120, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves.
Engine tuning switches to a sportier setting.
TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces.
M Dynamic Mode MDM, refer to page 120, is
122
SPORT
Sporty tuning of the steering and drivetrain for
greater driving agility.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the profile currently used.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving stability control systems
Configuring SPORT
Controls
Selected program
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 123, the SPORT driving
mode can be set to individual specifications.
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
▷ Activate SPORT.
▷ "Configure SPORT"
▷ Configure the SPORT driving mode.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated.
Using iDrive:
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed on the
Control Display.
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
3. "Configure SPORT"
4. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the
SPORT driving mode is activated.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
COMFORT
Concept
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 122.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
123
Controls
Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Cruise control
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupting,
refer to page 124.
Store speed, refer to page 125.
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
trol, refer to page 126.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
124
Overview
Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to
page 125.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving comfort
Controls
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
Setting the speed
Switching off
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ If MDM is activated or DSC is deactivated.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
to page 126.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
125
Controls
Driving comfort
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green:
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
Continuing cruise control
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
General information
Brief status display
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Selected desired speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
System limits
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear, then the
object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving comfort
Controls
Functional requirements
▷ Visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the rear bumper.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ By the two rear corner sensors at ap‐
prox. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at ap‐
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion R.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
Safety information
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to
physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
PDC is not yet active.◀
Overview
WARNING
Signal tones
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehi‐
cle is approaching an object. E.g., if an object
is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a sig‐
nal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Using iDrive:
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. "PDC"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
127
Controls
Driving comfort
5. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is selected.
6. Press the Controller.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
Visual warning
▷ With moving objects.
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings
System limits
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
coats.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
stance sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
sound sources is no longer present, the sys‐
tem is again fully functional.
128
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving comfort
Malfunction
Controls
Switching on/off
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via iDrive.
Rearview camera
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
Concept
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated:
Safety information
"Rear view camera"
WARNING
The rearview camera image is displayed.
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Camera
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo can lead to mal‐
functions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, spa‐
tially shaped markings are displayed.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
129
Controls
Driving comfort
Pathway lines
Obstacle marking
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving comfort
Controls
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, certain
assistance functions also take into account
data from the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
131
Controls
Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
Interior air quality
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
The air quality inside the vehicle is improved
by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter,
and a climate-control system for regulating
temperature, air flow, and recirculated-air
mode.
In addition there are other functions which de‐
pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic
climate control with automatic recirculated-air
control AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
1
Seat heating, left 53
6
Temperature
2
Vent settings
7
Seat heating, right 53
3
Rear window defroster
8
Cooling function
4
Air flow
9
Recirculated-air mode
5
AUTO program
10 Interior temperature sensor
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Climate control
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
Controls
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
▷ Seat heating.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Switching off
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 160, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Temperature
AUTO program
Concept
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant.
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Depending on the selected tempera‐
ture and outside influences, the air is directed
to the windshield, side windows, upper body,
and into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 133, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Recirculated-air mode
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Operation
Concept
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
133
Controls
Climate control
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
Operation
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷
Windows.
▷
Upper body region.
▷
▷
Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
Floor area.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Controlling the air flow manually
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
dows and remove condensation:
Concept
▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐
dows.
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
▷ Increase the temperature.
Operation
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
134
▷ Increasing the air flow.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 193.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Climate control
Controls
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1
Seat heating, left 53
10 Air distribution, right
2
Temperature, left
11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
3
AUTO program
12 Air distribution, left
4
Display
13 Rear window defroster
5
Maximum cooling
6
Temperature, right
14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
7
Seat heating, right 53
8
Air conditioning
9
Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Press any button except for the following:
Temperature
▷ Rear window defroster.
Concept
▷ Seat heating.
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
135
Controls
Climate control
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant.
Maximum cooling
Concept
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
General information
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the
engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
AUTO program
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 160, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
136
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Depending on the selected tempera‐
ture, the intensity of the AUTO program, and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 136, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
In the AUTO program, the air flow may be re‐
duced during a phone call on the hands-free
system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Climate control
Intensity
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside
air. The outside air supply is shut off and the
interior air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐
lutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
Controls
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
program first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and floor
area: driver's side only.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
137
Controls
Climate control
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Switching on/off
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards
the side windows as needed.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature in the upper body region, arrow 3.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
Toward blue: colder.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the air conditioning or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
This does not change the set interior tem‐
perature for the driver and front passenger.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Toward red: warmer.
Settings
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when car's in‐
terior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 193.
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Climate control
Ventilation in the rear
Controls
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus,
limit the maximum activation time to save
the vehicle battery. The system will be
available again after the engine is started or
after a short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the adjusted interior
temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Switching on/off directly
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
Parked-car ventilation
2. "Climate"
Concept
4. Set the desired time.
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's
interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.
Activating the activation time
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on
and off directly or by using preset activation
times. The system remains switched on for
30 minutes.
The parked-car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready
state.
▷ Direct operation or preset activation time:
does not depend on external temperature.
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the activation time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
139
Controls
Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the integrated Uni‐
versal Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func‐
tions of remote-controlled systems, such as
garage door drives or lighting systems. The
integrated Universal Remote Control replaces
up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
interior mirror must be programmed with the
desired functions. The hand-held transmitter
for the particular system is required in order to
program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
Control elements on the interior mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
140
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Interior equipment
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all
programming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Controls
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the desired button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once synchronization is
complete, the programmed function will be
carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
6. To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
1. Switch on the ignition.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior mirror buttons.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features a rolling code
radio system.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the hand-held
transmitter.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
141
Controls
Interior equipment
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror.
hold the two outer buttons on the interior mir‐
ror simultaneously for approximately 20 sec‐
onds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes rapidly.
Digital compass
Overview
If the LED does not flash faster after at
most 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the programming starting with
step 4. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
Control button
2
Mirror display
Mirror display
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition
is started. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and
142
1
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Interior equipment
Controls
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone that corre‐
sponds with your location appears in the
mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
played.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
button again to switch between English "E"
and German "O".
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
143
Controls
Interior equipment
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
handle. Make sure that children do not use the
cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀
NOTE
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
The cigarette lighter is located in the center
console.
Opening
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
General information
Raise cover.
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Cigarette lighter
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire
and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its
144
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, for instance portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag
or be thrown around in the car's interior when
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Interior equipment
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that devices and cables are not in the airbag's
area of unfolding.◀
Controls
In the cargo area
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
The socket is located on the left side in the
cargo area.
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front center console
USB interface/AUX-IN port
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.
A mobile audio device, for instance a MP3
player, can be connected using the AUX-IN
port.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the USB inter‐
face is located in the center console or in the
glove compartment.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
USB interface in the glove
compartment
Rear center console
Mobile storage devices with USB port can be
connected to the USB interface in the glove
compartment.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing profiles, refer to
page 41.
▷ Loading of software updates.
Remove the cover.
▷ Adding music files to the music collection
and saving the music collection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
145
Controls
Interior equipment
USB interface in the center console
Connecting an external device
In addition to the USB storage devices descri‐
bed above, additional mobile devices with USB
port can be connected to the USB interface in
the center console.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB in‐
terface.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
serted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for example
MP3 player.
This allows further uses:
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing video films via USB video.
Information about compatible USB devices can
be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Overview
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot
be guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this. At
higher temperatures, the USB storage de‐
vice may cause a reduction in the charging
current.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it is
connected to the USB interface.
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
cated in the center armrest.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
is being used, settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Non-compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
146
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Interior equipment
Cargo area
Controls
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest is con‐
nected to the center section.
With the through-loading system: the rear seat
backrest is divided at a ratio of 40/20/40.
NOTE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when
folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk
of property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the cargo area
1. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
area to release the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the cargo area. The center section can be
separately folded down from the rear.
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves
forward slightly.
3. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior,
e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the backrest engages into the locking af‐
ter folding it back.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
Fold back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seating
position and engage it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
147
Controls
Interior equipment
Fold down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull the center sec‐
tion forward.
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Storage compartments
Controls
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage
compartment, in front of the cup holders,
refer to page 150.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 150.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 151.
▷ With two rear seats: Storage compartment
between the rear seats, refer to page 151.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 149.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 150.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 150.
Pull the handle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
149
Controls
Storage compartments
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
Fold cover closed.
WARNING
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the tail‐
gate, refer to page 41, e.g.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There
is a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable
objects in the vehicle's interior.◀
Front storage compartment
Driver's side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest in front of the cup holders.
Center armrest
Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Pull the handle.
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Storage compartments
Controls
Cup holders
Opening
Safety information
WARNING
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning
The center armrest can be pushed forward or
backward and engages in the end positions.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
Connection for an external audio
device
An external audio device, for in‐
stance an MP3 player, can be
connected via the AUX-IN port
or the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.
Rear
Storage compartment in the
rear
In the center armrest.
A storage compartment is located in the center
console.
Storage compartment
between the rear seats
There is a storage compartment between the
rear seats.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
151
Controls
Storage compartments
Multi-function hook
NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
of property damage. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
Clothes hooks
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping bags,
from the multi-function hooks. Only transport
heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been
appropriately secured.◀
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
General information
To secure the cargo, refer to page 162, there
are two or four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
The clothes hooks are located in the rear.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to secure the
cargo, refer to page 162, and store small
parts.
Storage compartment
One storage compartment each is located on
the left and right side.
Net for storage compartment
Smaller objects can be stored in the net of
right storage compartment.
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Storage compartments
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Driving tips
BMW M2 Technology
BMW M2 Technology
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
High-performance engine
For this purpose, fully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Compound brake
The high-performance braking system has
perforated compound brake discs.
Because of particular structural characteristics,
there may be operation-related noises during
braking. However, this has no effect on per‐
formance, operational reliability and reliability
of the brake.
Drivetrain
General information
With a displacement of 3 liters, the high-per‐
formance engine generates a maximum power
of 365 hp and a maximum torque of
343 lb ft/465 Nm with Overboost
369 lb ft/500 Nm. With its spontaneous re‐
sponse behavior, a speed range of wide utility
results. The maximum engine speed is
7,000 rpm and is electronically controlled. Be‐
cause of the high engine dynamics, the maxi‐
mum engine speed with the vehicle stationary
is reduced.
Warm-up
During the engine warm-up phase, the highperformance engine has a somewhat rougher
running behavior because of the emission con‐
trols.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the na‐
ture of the system.
Overboost
With this vehicle, particular value was placed
on the direct connection from engine to the
drivetrain. Due to the torsionally rigid design of
the drivetrain, as is typical in a sports car, the
transmission of the torque also gives acoustic
feedback.
When there are load changes, this may result
in clicking noises. The do not cause any im‐
pairment of the operation or the service life of
the components.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
The standard brake linings and the wear indi‐
cators are not designed for racetrack opera‐
tion.
Overboost temporarily increases the maximum
torque to 369 lb ft/500 Nm, for example when
passing.
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Breaking-in period
At 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Have drive-in checkup maintenance per‐
formed.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,100 miles/5,000 km
The engine and road speed can gradually be
increased to a constant speed of
137 mph/220 km/h.
Use the maximum speed of 155 mph/250 km/h
only briefly, e.g., when passing.
Tires
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
General information
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle,
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of
the respective parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but
do not exceed 5,500 rpm and
106 mph/170 km/h.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
157
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to
exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
Hot exhaust system
General information
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
not remove the heat shields installed and never
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact
with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle
or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐
haust system.◀
158
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Things to remember when driving
Braking safely
Hills
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
General information
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
The pulsing of the brake pedal indicates that
ABS is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can emit functional noises. Func‐
tional noises have no effect on the perform‐
ance and operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
WARNING
Driving tips
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
Manual transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
M double-clutch transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down in sequential mode, refer to
page 78.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
Driving in wet conditions
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐
gine braking effect, braking force boost and
steering assistance, are restricted or not avail‐
able at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
drive in idle state or with the engine switched
off.◀
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Brake disc corrosion
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
159
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTE
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler,
e.g., when driving over curbs or entering into
underground vehicle parking garages. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that there is
sufficient ground clearance available.◀
M Driver's Package: driving in the
higher speed range
WARNING
Damage to vehicle components can neg‐
atively impact the driving performance at high
speeds. This includes, among other things
tires, underbody and parts for improving aero‐
dynamics. There is a risk of an accident. Have
damage corrected by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop. Do not drive at high speeds until the
damage is corrected.◀
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Loading
Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
lane stability, lengthening the braking distan‐
ces and changing the steering response.
There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to
the permitted load capacity of the tires and
never exceed the permitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
161
Driving tips
Loading
Load
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
To secure the cargo there are two or four lash‐
ing eyes in the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
Floor net
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
To secure the cargo the floor net can also be
used.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps, the floor net, or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
area floor.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Loading
Safety information
Driving tips
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Securing
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., using
ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The fixing points are located in the roof drip rail
above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
163
Driving tips
Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and
emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Drive away immediately
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which
are no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Saving fuel
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with low
engine speed and at a constant speed.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift
indicator, refer to page 88.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Driving tips
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stopand-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 193.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Mobility
Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
General information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 170, prior to refueling.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Refueling
Mobility
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Observe the following when
refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Avoid overfilling.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
169
Mobility
Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
170
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.◀
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Fuel
Mobility
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
171
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
The displays of inflation devices may underread by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: perform a reset of
the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting tire
pressure to a new value.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 173, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
▷ Driving comfort.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
Safety information
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 173, and adjust as necessary.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold, i.e., after driving no more than
1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 2 hours.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires at ambient
temperature.
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Wheels and tires
Mobility
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 173, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
M2
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
235/40 R 18
95 V M+S XL
Std
2.1 / 30
2.3 / 33
F: 245/35 R 19 2.4 / 35
93 (Y) XL Std
-
R: 265/35 R 19 98 (Y) XL Std
2.4 / 35
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
M2
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
235/40 R 18
95 V M+S XL
Std
2.4 / 35
2.7 / 39
F: 245/35 R 19 2.7 / 39
93 (Y) XL Std
-
R: 265/35 R 19 98 (Y) XL Std
2.9 / 42
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
173
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR
– on the certification label on the driver’s door
pillar.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle
Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Speed letter
Treadwear
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0117
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0117: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 0117: the tire was manufactured in the
1st week of 2017.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Recommendation
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Temperature
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
ture A
174
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Wheels and tires
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Mobility
Minimum tread depth
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
ches/1.6 mm.
The wear indicators are marked on the tire
sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
Tire tread
General information
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 inches/3 mm.
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires
are less suitable for winter operation.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
There is an increased risk of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐
ches/3 mm.
Winter tires
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e.g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
175
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have vehicle towed or transported as
needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving
over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec‐
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
is a danger of accidents and property damage.
If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive
over them slowly and carefully.◀
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
due to tolerances despite the same official size
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The man‐
ufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests
that you use wheels and tires that have been
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.◀
Recommended tire brands
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
176
For each tire size, BMW recommends certain
tire brands. The tire brands can be identified
by a star on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Wheels and tires
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a corresponding information label/
sticker in the field of view. The label is available
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against switching wheels between the front
and rear axles. This can impair the handling
characteristics.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Mobility
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning light at a sufficient
distance.
▷ Change wheels only on a flat, solid and
slip-resistant surface. On soft or slippery
ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc.,
the vehicle or the vehicle jack may slip
away sideways.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine, or else
there is a danger to life.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
177
Mobility
Wheels and tires
General information
Compressor
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
1
Holder for sealant container
2
Compressor
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
3
Connector/cable for socket
4
Connection hose
5
On/off switch
6
Inflation pressure dial
7
Reduce inflation pressure
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked and replaced at the
next opportunity.
Filling the tire with sealant
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
1. Shake the sealant container.
Sealant container
2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the
compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Wheels and tires
3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐
nector of the sealant container.
4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐
pressor housing in an upright position.
5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
Mobility
6. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
7. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐
nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
179
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Correcting the tire inflation pressure
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
1. Stop at a suitable location.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, switch
on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Stowing the Mobility System
Continuing the trip
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the sealant container.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer previously connected to the tire
valve with the available connector on the
sealant container.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐
ing from the container.
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
180
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount
snow chains on tires that are designated by
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Wheels and tires
their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.◀
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 235/40 R 18.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐
cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐
structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, if needed,
briefly activate M Dynamic Mode.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When tire sealants are used, an immediate
wheel change when there is a loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure in the event of a flat tire is not al‐
ways necessary.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
Mobility
ing from summer to winter tires. Using the ve‐
hicle jack frequently may cause it to jam or
become damaged. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only use the vehi‐
cle jack to change an emergency wheel or a
spare tire in the event of a flat tire.◀
WARNING
On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow,
ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away.
There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the
tire/wheel on a flat, solid and slip-resistant sur‐
face.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is
inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
WARNING
WARNING
The vehicle jack is provided by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer for changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. The vehicle jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use, for instance for chang‐
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. While the vehicle is
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
181
Mobility
Wheels and tires
raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle
or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Change the wheel as far away as possible
from passing traffic.
▷ Park the vehicle on solid, non-slip and level
ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
General information
▷ Engage a gear or selector lever position P.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
On a level surface
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for ex‐
ample a rock, in front of and behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that
you wish to change.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
On a slight downhill gradient
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suita‐
ble objects, for instance a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
the rolling direction.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Wheels and tires
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with the described hand position and
do not change this position while using the ve‐
hicle jack.◀
Mobility
4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon
as the vehicle jack is under load and con‐
tinue turning the crank or lever with one
hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
tended vertically.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the crank with your other
hand, arrow 2.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the
crank or lever clockwise.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire
surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
183
Mobility
Wheels and tires
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
3. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
4. Turn the crank on the vehicle jack counter‐
clockwise to retract the jack and lower the
vehicle.
5. Remove the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop to have the damaged tire replaced.
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Engine compartment
Mobility
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1
Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
5
Engine compartment fuse box
2
Vehicle identification number
6
Coolant reservoir
3
Filler neck for washer fluid
7
Oil filler neck
4
Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
185
Mobility
Engine compartment
WARNING
Hood is unlocked.
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, for in‐
stance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away from
moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Engine oil
Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
Electronic oil measurement
Status display
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a Check Control message is displayed.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
Displaying the engine oil level
▷ Idling of the engine.
Using iDrive:
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
1. "Vehicle info"
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
3.
When a dynamic driving style is used, such as
when cornering fast, the system is unable to
measure the engine oil level. With this driving
style, measure the engine oil level using a de‐
tailed measurement, refer to page 188.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display.
▷ Detailed measurement.
2. "Vehicle status"
"Engine oil level"
Engine oil level display messages
Concept
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
A red indicator light indicates that the
engine oil pressure is too low.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
187
Mobility
Engine oil
Safety information
3.
"Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Detailed measurement
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Concept
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary,
and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a Check Control message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ M Double clutch transmission: selector
lever in selector lever position N and accel‐
erator pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
188
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage.
Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Engine oil
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 185.
Opening the oil filler neck
1. Open the hood, refer to page 185.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Mobility
Suitable engine oil types
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils is available
at a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
3. Add engine oil.
API SL or superior oil rating.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Safety information
Viscosity grades
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect oil rating.◀
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
189
Mobility
190
Engine oil
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Coolant
Mobility
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Coolant level
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
General information
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
191
Mobility
Coolant
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Maintenance
Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 87, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
193
Mobility
Maintenance
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Replacing components
Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 74.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
NOTE
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under
the cargo floor panel.
Wiper blade replacement
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Safety information
NOTE
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
Light/bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have the relevant work carried out a deal‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
195
Mobility
Replacing components
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 196.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes, which are
related to conventional lasers, are officially
designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 196.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of property damage. When working
on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
its base.◀
196
Xenon headlights
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Canada: CONTAINS MERCURY — Hg: The
High Intensity Discharge HID headlights con‐
tain mercury. If your vehicle needs to be dis‐
posed, please remove the HID headlights be‐
fore disposal. HID headlights that are removed
should be recycled, re-used or disposed as
hazardous waste according to applicable laws.
For information on safe handling & disposal,
please visit http://www.ec.gc.ca/mercure-mer‐
cury/ or call the BMW Customer Interaction
Center at 1-800-567-2691.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e.g., water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Replacing components
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Front lights, bulb replacement
Xenon headlights
Mobility
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Turn signal
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 196.
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
Safety information
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Overview
1
Parking lights / daytime running lights.
2
Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher
3
Turn signal
2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
socket counterclockwise and remove.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Xenon headlights
Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.
The parking lights and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
197
Mobility
Replacing components
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
Overview
1
Turn signal
2
Top brake lamp
3
Reversing lamp
4
Rear lamp
5
Bottom brake lights
sure that the nuts do not drop into the
bumper area. In addition to the two outer
fasteners, there is another inner fastener.
4. Hold the grip rail in one hand, arrow 1, and
brace against the outside with your other
hand, arrow 2. Carefully pry out the tail
lamp, arrow 3, until the rubber mount re‐
leases from the inner fastener.
Bulb replacement
General information
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 196.
Turn signal, brake light, tail light and reversing
light: 21-watt bulb, P21W.
Upper brake light: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
Replacing the bulbs
Removing the tail lamp
1. Open tailgate.
2. Open the two covers on the tail lamp.
3. With the handle of the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit, loosen and re‐
move the nuts on the two fasteners. Make
198
5. Remove the plug from the bulb holder.
1. Loosen the six fasteners on the tail lamp,
arrows 1, and remove the tail lamp from the
lamp holder, arrow 2.
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Replacing components
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder to the
tail lamp. Make sure that the bulb holder
engages in all fasteners.
Installing the tail lamp
1. Connect the plug to the bulb holder.
2. Insert the tail lamp straight in and press it
in, arrow 1, until the rubber mount latches
in the inner fastener. Make sure when in‐
serting the tail lamp that the rubber lip, ar‐
row 2, on the top side of the tail lamp does
not fold over. Screw on the two nuts, ar‐
row 3, and close covers.
Mobility
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
tures will be available without restriction and
any Check Control messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will disappear.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
Central brake lamp and license plate
lamp
Charging the battery
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 196.
General information
These lights are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light.
Vehicle battery
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
Maintenance
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
199
Mobility
Replacing components
Fuses
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Replacing a fuse
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 204, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
The fuses are located in two different places in
the vehicle.
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
In the engine compartment
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
On right-hand drive vehicles, the fuses are lo‐
cated on the opposite side of the engine com‐
partment.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize
the system.
General information
Removing the cover
1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
2. Squeeze and raise the holder, arrow 2.
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Replacing components
Mobility
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Attaching the covers
1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
three screws.
In the cargo area
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
201
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
Overview
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
SOS button in the roofliner
Hazard warning flashers
Functional requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Under certain conditions, such as if the airbags
trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
cally initiated immediately after a severe acci‐
dent. Automatic Collision Notification is not af‐
fected by pressing the SOS button.
Intelligent emergency call
Initiating an Emergency Request
manually
The button is located in the center console.
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through the system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
202
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
button lights up green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Breakdown assistance
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
Mobility
Warning triangle
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serves to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW
Response Center through the loudspeak‐
ers, the BMW Response Center may still
be able to hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
Roadside Assistance
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed via iDrive or a connection to Road‐
side Assistance can be established directly.
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area in
the storage compartment.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
203
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
1. Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
nal.
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Breakdown assistance
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
Mobility
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehi‐
cle's response.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Tow truck
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
With rear-wheel drive
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
for instance approach control warning with
braking function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
Towing
Information the following instructions:
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
M double-clutch transmission:
transporting the vehicle
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
General information
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
205
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow truck
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
There is a risk of damage to property.
Tow rope
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Towing other vehicles
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Breakdown assistance
Tow fitting
Mobility
Screw thread for tow fitting
General information
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
Tow-starting
M double-clutch transmission
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 195, are together in the cargo
area.
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Use of the tow fitting:
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Observe the notes on using the tow fit‐
ting.◀
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the M double-clutch transmission.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 203. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 66.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
207
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Care
Mobility
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Vehicle washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Water can penetrate in the windshield
area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
risk of property damage. Avoid high-pressure
washers.◀
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Follow
the following instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of property damage. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.◀
Before driving into a vehicle wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
vehicle wash, take the following steps:
Manual transmission:
1. Drive into the vehicle wash.
2. Shift to neutral.
3. Switch the engine off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
209
Mobility
Care
M double-clutch transmission:
Headlights
1. Drive into the vehicle wash.
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Switch off the engine.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automati‐
cally engaged when the ignition is
switched off. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not switch drive-ready state
off in vehicle washes.◀
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
To start the engine with manual transmission:
Vehicle care
1. Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
Vehicle care products
2. Press on the clutch pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
To start the engine with a M double clutch
transmission:
1. Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Care
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Mobility
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
211
Mobility
Care
Fine wood parts
Carpets and floor mats
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
cloth lightly with water.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
Do not soak the roofliner.
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Safety belts
Displays/screens
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
NOTE
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
212
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Care
Mobility
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Reference
Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
e.g., due to the selected special equipment,
country version or country-specific measure‐
ment method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
the selected special equipment, tires, load and
chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
BMW M2 Coupe
Width with mirrors
inches/mm
78.1/1,984
Width without mirrors
inches/mm
73/1,854
Height
inches/mm
55.5/1,410
Length
inches/mm
176.2/4,476
Wheelbase
inches/mm
106/2,693
Smallest turning radius diam.
ft/m
38.4/11.7
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Technical data
Reference
Weights
M2
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission
lbs/kg
4,430/2,009
M double-clutch transmission
lbs/kg
4,430/2,009
Load
lbs/kg
840/381
Approved front axle load
lbs/kg
2,140/971
Approved rear axle load
lbs/kg
2,380/1,080
Approved roof load capacity
lbs/kg
165/75
Capacities
Fuel tank, approx.
US gal/liters
Notes
13.7/52.0
Fuel quality, refer to
page 170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
217
Reference
Appendix
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
Wireless charging tray
Mounting position of the product.
Note
This device has been tested for human expo‐
sure limits and found compliant at a minimum
distance of 4 in/10 cm during operation.
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be
maintained in every direction when operating
the device.
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Appendix
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Reference
219
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 119
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 79
Accessories and parts 8
Activated-charcoal filter 138
Activation times, parked-car
ventilation 139
Active M differential 121
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 117
Adaptive Light Control 98
Additives, oil 189
After washing vehicle 210
Airbags 101
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 102
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 133, 137
Air conditioning 133, 136
Air, dehumidifying, see Air
conditioning 133, 136
Air distribution,
manual 134, 137
Air flow, air conditioner 134
Air flow, automatic climate
control 137
Air pressure, tires 172
Air vents, see Ventilation 138
Alarm system 44
Alarm, unintentional 46
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 177
Alternative oil types 189
Ambient light 100
Antifreeze, washer fluid 75
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 119
220
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 119
App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6
Approach control warning
with City light braking func‐
tion 110
Approved axle load 217
Arrival time 92
Ashtray 144
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 203
Assistance when driving
off 123
Attentiveness assistant 117
AUTO intensity 137
Automatic climate con‐
trol 132
Automatic climate control
with enhanced features 135
Automatic Curb Monitor 59
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 103
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 97
Automatic locking 44
Automatic recirculated-air
control 137
Automatic vehicle wash 209
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 136
AUTO program, climate con‐
trol 133
AUTO program, intensity 137
Auto Start/Stop function 68
Auto washing 209
AUX-IN port, general informa‐
tion 145
Average fuel consumption 91
Average speed 91
Axle loads, weights 217
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 52
Backrest, width 53
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 203
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 199
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 36
Battery, vehicle 199
Being towed, see Tow-start‐
ing and towing 205
Belts, safety belts 54
Beverage holder, cup
holder 151
BMW Assist 6
BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 193
BMW M technology 156
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 151
Brake assistant 119
Brake discs, break-in 157
Brake force display 117
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 117
Brake pads, break-in 157
Braking, information 159
Breakdown assis‐
tance 202, 203
Break-in 157
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 94
Bulb replacement 195
Bulb replacement, front 197
Bulb replacement, rear 198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Everything from A to Z
Bulbs and lights 195
Button, Start/Stop 66
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 203
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 44
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 44
Camera-based assistance
systems, see Intelligent
Safety 109
Camera lenses, care 212
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 129
Can holder, see Cup
holder 151
Care, displays 212
Care, vehicle 210
Care, washing the vehi‐
cle 209
Cargo 161
Cargo area 147
Cargo area, enlarging 147
Cargo area, loading 162
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 152
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 162
Carpet, care 212
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 158
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 193
Center armrest 150
Center console 16
Central Information Display
(CID), see Control Dis‐
play 18
Central locking system 38
Central screen, see Control
Display 18
Changes, technical, see For
Your Own Safety 7
Changing parts 195
Changing wheels 181
Changing wheels/tires 176
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 10
Check Control 82
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 187
Children, seating position 62
Children, transporting
safely 62
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 64
Child restraint system 62
Child restraint systems,
mounting 63
Child seat, mounting 63
Child seats 62
Chrome parts, care 211
Cigarette lighter 144
Cleaning, displays 212
Climate control 132, 135
Clothes hooks 152
Cockpit 14
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 71
Combination switch, see
Wiper system 72
Comfort Access 38
COMFORT program, driving
dynamics 123
Compartments in the
doors 150
Compass 142
Compound brake 156
Compressor 177
Computer, see Onboard
Computer 90
Condensation on win‐
dows 138
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 160
Condition Based Service
CBS 193
Reference
Confirmation signal 44
ConnectedDrive 6
ConnectedDrive Services 6
Container for washer fluid 75
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 93
Controller 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 119
Convenient opening with the
remote control 35
Coolant 191
Cooling, maximum 136
Cooling system 191
Corrosion on brake discs 159
Cosmetic mirror 144
Courtesy lights during un‐
locking 35
Courtesy lights with the vehi‐
cle locked 35
Cruise control 124
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see cruise
control 124
Cruising range 86
Cup holder 151
Current fuel consumption 86
D
Damage, tires 175
Data, technical 216
Date 94
Date display 86
Daytime running lights 98
Defrosting, see defrosting the
windows 134
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 138
Defrosting the windows 134
Dehumidifying, air 133, 136
Deleting personal data 25
Deletion of personal data 25
Destination distance 92
Differential lock 121
Digital clock 86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
221
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Digital compass 142
Dimensions 216
Dimmable exterior mirrors 59
Dimmable interior mirror 60
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 71
Display, electronic, instru‐
ment cluster 81
Display, engine tempera‐
ture 92
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 99
Displays, care 212
Disposal, coolant 192
Disposal, vehicle battery 200
Distance control, see
PDC 126
Distance to destination 92
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Double-clutch transmis‐
sion 76
Drivelogic 79
Drive mode 78
Drive-off assistant 123
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 119
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 109
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 109
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 121
Driving instructions, breakin 157
Driving mode 121
Driving notes, general 158
Driving on racetracks 156
Driving program, see Drive‐
logic 79
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 119
Driving tips 158
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 119
222
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 119
E
EfficientDynamics 87
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 81
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 187
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 119
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 169
Emergency Request 202
Emergency service, see
Roadside Assistance 203
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 41
Energy Control 86
Energy recovery 87
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 68
Engine, automatic switchoff 68
Engine compartment 185
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 185
Engine coolant 191
Engine oil 187
Engine oil, adding 188
Engine oil additives 189
Engine oil change 189
Engine oil filler neck 188
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 189
Engine oil types, suitable 189
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 203
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 67
Engine stop 68
Engine temperature, dis‐
play 92
Entering a vehicle wash 209
Equipment, interior 140
Error displays, see Check
Control 82
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 119
Exchanging wheels/tires 176
Exhaust system 158
Exiting a vehicle wash 209
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 59
Exterior mirrors 58
Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐
tion 59
External start 203
External temperature dis‐
play 86
External temperature warn‐
ing 86
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 82
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 46
Fan, see Air flow 134, 137
Filler neck for engine oil 188
Fine wood, care 212
First-aid kit 203
Flat tire, changing
wheels 181
Flat tire message, FTM 109
Flat tire message, TPM 106
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 108
Flat tire, repairing 177
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 104
Flat tire warning light,
FTM 109
Flat tire warning light,
TPM 106
Flooding 158
Floor carpet, care 212
Floor mats, care 212
Fogged up windows 134
Fold-away position, wiper 74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Everything from A to Z
Fold back rear seat back‐
rests 147
Foot brake 159
For Your Own Safety 7
Front airbags 101
Front lights 197
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 103
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 104
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 108
Fuel 170
Fuel cap 168
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 91
Fuel filler flap 168
Fuel gauge 85
Fuel quality 170
Fuel recommendation 170
Fuel, tank capacity 217
Fuse 200
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 140
Gasoline 170
Gear change 78
Gear shift indicator 88
General driving notes 158
Glare shield 144
Glass sunroof, electric 47
Glass sunroof, initialize the
system 49
Glove compartment 149
GPS geolocation, vehicle po‐
sition 94
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 217
Ground clearance 160
H
Handbrake, see parking
brake 71
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 141
Hazard warning flashers 202
Head airbags 101
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 97
Headlamps 197
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 97
Headlight flasher 72
Headlight glass 196
Headlights, care 210
Head restraints, front 55
Head restraints, rear 56
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 162
High-beam Assistant 98
High beams 72
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 98
Higher speed range 160
High-performance en‐
gine 156
Hills 159
Hill start assistant, see Driveoff assistant 123
Holder for beverages 151
Homepage 6
Hood 185
Horn 14
Hotel function, tailgate 41
Hot exhaust system 158
Hydroplaning 158
I
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 86
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 86
Identification marks, tires 173
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 10
iDrive 18
Ignition off 66
Reference
Ignition on 66
Indicator/warning lights, see
Check Control 82
Indicator light, see Check
Control 82
Individual air distribu‐
tion 134, 137
Individual settings, see Per‐
sonal Profile 41
Inflation pressure, tires 172
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 108
Info Display, see Onboard
Computer 90
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 105
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 108
Instrument cluster 81
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 81
Instrument lighting 99
Integrated key 37
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 30
Intelligent emergency
call 202
Intelligent Safety 109
Intended use 7
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 137
Interior equipment 140
Interior lights 99
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 35
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 35
Interior mirror 58
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 60
Interior mirror, compass 142
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 60
Interior motion sensor 46
Internet page 6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
223
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 87
Interval mode 73
In the vicinity of the center
console 16
In the vicinity of the roof‐
liner 17
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel 14
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 182
Jam protection system, glass
sunroof 48
Jump-starting 203
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 38
Key, mechanical 37
Key Memory, see Personal
Profile 41
Key, see Remote control 34
Knee airbag 102
L
Label on recommended
tires 176
Lamp replacement, front 197
Lamp replacement, rear 198
Lane departure warning 115
Lane threshold, warning 115
Language on Control Dis‐
play 94
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 64
Launch Control 79
Leather, care 211
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 196
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 25
224
Light 96
Light-alloy wheels, care 211
Light control 98
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 196
Lighting 96
Light replacement 195
Lights and bulbs 195
Light switch 96
Load 162
Loading 161
Location, vehicle position 94
Locking, automatic 44
Locking, settings 44
Low beams 96
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 98
Lower back support 52
Low Speed Assistant 77
Luggage rack, see Roofmounted luggage rack 162
Lumbar support 52
M
Maintenance 193
Maintenance require‐
ments 193
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 87
Maintenance system,
BMW 193
Make-up mirror 144
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 82
Manual air distribu‐
tion 134, 137
Manual air flow 134, 137
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 169
Manual transmission 76
Matte finish 211
Maximum cooling 136
Maximum speed, display 89
Maximum speed, winter
tires 177
M Compound brake 156
M differential, active 121
MDM, M Dynamic Mode 120
M double-clutch transmis‐
sion 76
M Driver's Package, driving
instructions 160
M Dynamic Mode MDM 120
Measurement, units of 94
Medical kit 203
Memory function 57
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 90
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, see iDrive operating
concept 20
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 82
Microfilter 134, 138
Minimum tread, tires 175
Mirror 58
Mirror, see Memory func‐
tion 57
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 158
Mobility System 177
Modifications, technical, see
For Your Own Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 196
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint
systems 63
M technology 156
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
Multimedia 6
N
Navigation 6
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 55
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Everything from A to Z
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel
cleaner 211
New wheels and tires 176
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 194
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 194
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 130
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 171
Odometer 86
Office 6
Oil 187
Oil, adding 188
Oil additives 189
Oil change 189
Oil change interval, service
requirements 87
Oil filler neck 188
Oil types, alternative 189
Oil types, suitable 189
Old batteries, disposal 200
Onboard Computer 90
Onboard Computer, Control
Display 92
Onboard vehicle tool kit 195
Opening and closing 34
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Optional equipment 7
Outside air, see Automatic re‐
circulated-air control 137
P
Paint, vehicle 211
Panic alarm, see Panic
mode 45
Panic mode 45
Park Distance Control
PDC 126
Parked-car ventilation 139
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 160
Parking aid, see PDC 126
Parking brake 71
Parking lights 96
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
ing downward 59
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 130
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 126
Pedestrian warning with Ap‐
proach control 113
Personal Profile 41
Personal Profile, exporting
profiles 43
Personal Profile, importing
profiles 43
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 47
Plastic, care 212
Power failure 200
Power sunroof, glass 47
Power windows 46
Prescribed engine oil
types 189
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 172
Pressure warning, tires 108
Preventing Auto Start
Stop 70
Profile, see Personal Pro‐
file 41
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 24
Protective function, glass
sunroof 48
Protective function, win‐
dows 47
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐
troller 19
R
Racetrack operation 156
Radiator fluid 191
Radio 6
Reference
Radio-operated remote con‐
trol, opening/closing 34
Radio-ready state 66
Rain sensor 73
Rear lights 198
Rear socket 145
Rearview camera 129
Rear window de‐
froster 134, 138
Recirculated-air filter 138
Recirculated-air
mode 133, 137
Recommended fuel
grade 171
Recommended tire
brands 176
Refueling 168
Remaining range 86
Remote control, additional 36
Remote control, integrated
key 37
Remote control, loss 36
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 36
Remote control, opening/
closing 34
Remote control, univer‐
sal 140
Replacing parts 195
Replacing wheels/tires 176
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 10
RES button, see Cruise con‐
trol 124
Reserve warning, see
Range 86
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 105
Retreaded tires 177
Roadside parking lights 96
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 141
RON recommended fuel
grade 171
Roofliner 17
Roof load capacity 217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
225
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 162
Rubber components,
care 211
S
Safe braking 159
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 55
Safety belts 54
Safety belts, care 212
Safety belts, see Safety
belts 54
Safety systems, airbags 101
Saving fuel 164
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 195
Sealant 177
Seat heating, front 53
Seating position for chil‐
dren 62
Seat, see Memory func‐
tion 57
Securing cargo 162
Selection list in instrument
cluster 90
Selector lever 77
Selector lever position 77
Sensors, care 212
Sequential mode 78
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 193
Service requirements, dis‐
play 87
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 203
Services, ConnectedDrive 6
Servotronic 121
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 124
226
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 44
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 93
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 79
Side airbags 101
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 44
Sitting safely 50
Size 216
Slide/tilt glass roof 47
SMS text messages, supple‐
mentary 85
Snow chains 180
Socket 144
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 194
SOS button 202
Speed, average 91
Speed Limit Info 89
Speed Limit Info, Onboard
Computer 92
Speed limits, display 89
Speed warning 93
Split screen 23
SPORT+ - program, driving
dynamics 122
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 93
SPORT program, driving dy‐
namics 122
Stability control systems 119
Standard equipment 7
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 68
Start/Stop button 66
Starting the engine 67
Status control display,
tires 105
Status information, iDrive 23
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering assistance 121
Steering wheel, adjusting 60
Steering wheel heating 61
Stopping the engine 68
Storage compartment in the
rear 151
Storage compartments 149
Storage, tires 177
Storing the vehicle 213
Stowing and securing
cargo 162
Suitable engine oil types 189
Summer tires, tread 175
Sun visor 144
Supplementary SMS text
messages 85
Switch for driving dynam‐
ics 121
Switch, see Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 23
T
Tachometer 85
Tailgate closing 41
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 41
Tailgate, hotel function 41
Tailgate opening 41
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 35
Tail lamps 198
Technical changes, see For
Your Own Safety 7
Technical data 216
Technology, BMW M 156
Telephone 6
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 133, 135
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 86
Temperature, engine 92
Terminal, starting aid 204
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 44
Thigh support 52
Through-loading system 147
Tilt alarm sensor 45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Everything from A to Z
Time 93
Time of arrival 92
Tire damage 175
Tire identification marks 173
Tire inflation pressure 172
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 108
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 104
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 177
Tires, changing 176
Tire sealant, see Mobility
System 177
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 172
Tire tread 175
Tone 6
Tool 195
Total vehicle weight 217
Touchpad 21
Towing 205
Tow-starting 205
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 104
Transmission, manual trans‐
mission 76
Transporting children
safely 62
Tread, tires 175
Trip computer 92
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 71
Trip odometer 86
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 86
Trunk, emergency unlock‐
ing 41
Turning radius lines, rearview
camera 130
Turn signals, operation 71
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 198
U
Unintentional alarm 46
Units of measurement 94
Universal remote control 140
Unlocking, settings 44
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 211
USB interface, general infor‐
mation 145
USB port, see USB inter‐
face 145
Use, intended 7
V
Vanity mirror 144
Vehicle battery 199
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 199
Vehicle, break-in 157
Vehicle care 210
Vehicle care products 210
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 10
Vehicle jack 182
Vehicle paint 211
Vehicle position, vehicle loca‐
tion 94
Vehicle storage 213
Vehicle wash 209
Vehicle, washing 209
Ventilation 138
Ventilation, see Parked-car
ventilation 139
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 10
Voice activation system 27
W
Warning displays, see Check
Control 82
Reference
Warning messages, see
Check Control 82
Warning triangle 203
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 75
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 74
Washer system 72
Washing the vehicle 209
Water on roads 158
Weights 217
Welcome lights 97
Welcome lights during un‐
locking 35
Wheel cleaner 211
Wheels, changing 176
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 172
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 108
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 104
Window defroster,
rear 134, 138
Windows, powered 46
Windshield washer fluid 75
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 74
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 72
Windshield washer system,
see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 72
Windshield wiper, see Wiper
system 72
Winter storage, care 213
Winter tires, suitable
tires 177
Winter tires, tread 175
Wiper 72
Wiper blades, replacing 195
Wiper fluid 75
Wiper, fold-away position 74
Wiper system 72
Wood, care 212
Word match concept 25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
227
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 195
X
Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
placement 197
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
BMW M
01402978584 ue
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
*BL297858400P*
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978584 - II/17
Download PDF
Similar pages